blob: e2dba93e374fda7f93c5dda34d28df8211e9eacc [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200150#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800151
152/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400157 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400165 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200167 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200170 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300171 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200172 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173};
174
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100182/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100205 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100222 bool radar_enabled;
223
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225};
226
227/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200295 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303 */
304enum ieee80211_bss_change {
305 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100327 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200329
330 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100331};
332
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300333/*
334 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
335 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
336 * filtering will be disabled.
337 */
338#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
339
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200341 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
342 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200343 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300344 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300345 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
346 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
347 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700348 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200349enum ieee80211_event_type {
350 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200351 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300352 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300353 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200354};
355
356/**
357 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
359 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
360 */
361enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700362 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
363 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
364};
365
366/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200367 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200368 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
369 */
370struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
371 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
372};
373
374/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200375 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
376 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200377 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200378 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
379 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200380 */
381enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
382 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200383 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200384 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
385 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200386};
387
388/**
389 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
390 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
391 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
392 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
393 */
394enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
395 MLME_SUCCESS,
396 MLME_DENIED,
397 MLME_TIMEOUT,
398};
399
400/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200401 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200402 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
403 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
404 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
405 */
406struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
408 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
409 u16 reason;
410};
411
412/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
414 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
415 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300416 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300417 */
418struct ieee80211_ba_event {
419 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
420 u16 tid;
421 u16 ssn;
422};
423
424/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200425 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200426 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200428 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300429 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300430 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200431 */
432struct ieee80211_event {
433 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
434 union {
435 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300437 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200438 } u;
439};
440
441/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200442 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
443 *
444 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
445 *
446 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
447 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
448 */
449struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
450 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
451 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
452};
453
454/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100455 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
456 *
457 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
458 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
459 *
460 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200461 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
462 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530463 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100464 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
465 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200466 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
467 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100468 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200469 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300470 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200471 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100472 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
473 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
474 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
475 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200476 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200477 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
478 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200479 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100480 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
481 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200482 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
483 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
484 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700485 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800486 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200487 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
488 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
489 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300490 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100491 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200492 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
493 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100494 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
495 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200496 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100497 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300498 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
499 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
500 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200501 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200502 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
503 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
504 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200505 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300506 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
507 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
508 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
509 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100510 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
511 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
512 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200513 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200514 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
515 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
516 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300517 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
518 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200519 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300520 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
521 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200522 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100523 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
524 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
525 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
526 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
527 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
528 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100529 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200530 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
531 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
532 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100533 */
534struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200535 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200537 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530538 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 u16 aid;
540 /* erp related data */
541 bool use_cts_prot;
542 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300543 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200544 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800545 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700546 u16 beacon_int;
547 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200548 u64 sync_tsf;
549 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100550 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100551 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300552 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200553 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200554 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200555 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
556 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100557 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200558 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300559 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100560 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200561 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200562 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300563 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300564 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
565 size_t ssid_len;
566 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200567 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100568 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100569 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200570 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100571};
572
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800573/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200574 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800575 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700576 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800577 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200579 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
580 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
581 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
582 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
583 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
584 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
585 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
586 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
587 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
588 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
589 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
592 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200597 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200598 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
599 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
600 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
601 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
602 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
603 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
604 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
605 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
607 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
608 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300609 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
610 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
612 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
613 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
615 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
616 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
619 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200620 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
621 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100624 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
625 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
626 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
628 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
629 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
630 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
632 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
633 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
635 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
636 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
638 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
639 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
642 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100643 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
644 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
645 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
646 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200647 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
648 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
649 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530650 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
651 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
652 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
654 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
655 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200656 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
657 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
659 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
660 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
662 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
663 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530664 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
665 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
666 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
667 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
668 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200669 *
670 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
671 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800672 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200673enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
685 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200701 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200705};
706
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200707#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
708
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200709/**
710 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
711 *
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
713 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
715 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200718 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200719 *
720 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
721 */
722enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100725 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100726 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200727 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200728};
729
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200730/*
731 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
732 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
733 */
734#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
737 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
738 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100739 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200742
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530743/**
744 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
745 * Rate Control algorithm.
746 *
747 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
748 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
749 *
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
752 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
756 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
758 * Greenfield mode.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
761 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
762 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530763 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
764 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
765 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
767 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200768enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
771 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
772
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100773 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800782};
783
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200784
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200785/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
786#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200787
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200788/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
789#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
790
791/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200792#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200793
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200794/* maximum number of rate table entries */
795#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
796
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200797/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200798 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200799 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200800 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
801 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200802 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803 *
804 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
805 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
806 *
807 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
808 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200809 *
810 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
811 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
812 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
813 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300814 * information::
815 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200816 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300817 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200818 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
819 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
820 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
821 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300822 * information should then contain::
823 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200824 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300825 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200826 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
827 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200828 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
830 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100831 u16 count:5,
832 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000833} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200834
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100835#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
836
837static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
838 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
839{
840 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200841 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
842 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100843}
844
845static inline u8
846ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
847{
848 return rate->idx & 0xF;
849}
850
851static inline u8
852ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
853{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200854 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100855}
856
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200857/**
858 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200859 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200860 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
861 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
862 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
863 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
864 *
865 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200866 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200867 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100868 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700869 * @control: union for control data
870 * @status: union for status data
871 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100872 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700873 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100874 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700875 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200876 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200877 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200878struct ieee80211_tx_info {
879 /* common information */
880 u32 flags;
881 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200882
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200883 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100884
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100885 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100886
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200887 union {
888 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200889 union {
890 /* rate control */
891 struct {
892 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
893 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
894 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200895 u8 use_rts:1;
896 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200897 u8 short_preamble:1;
898 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200899 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200900 };
901 /* only needed before rate control */
902 unsigned long jiffies;
903 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200904 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200905 union {
906 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
907 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
908
909 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
910 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
911 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
912 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
913 * sojourn time computation.
914 */
915 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
916 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200917 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200918 u32 flags;
919 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200920 } control;
921 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200922 u64 cookie;
923 } ack;
924 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200925 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200926 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200927 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100928 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200929 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300930 u16 tx_time;
931 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200932 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933 struct {
934 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
935 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200936 u8 pad[4];
937
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200938 void *rate_driver_data[
939 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
940 };
941 void *driver_data[
942 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200943 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700944};
945
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300946/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200947 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
948 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200949 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
950 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
951 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200952 *
953 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
954 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
955 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
956 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
957 */
958struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200959 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
960 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200961 const u8 *common_ies;
962 size_t common_ie_len;
963};
964
965
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200966static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
967{
968 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
969}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400970
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200971static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
972{
973 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
974}
975
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200976/**
977 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
978 *
979 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
980 *
981 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
982 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
983 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
984 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
985 *
986 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
987 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
988 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
989 */
990static inline void
991ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
992{
993 int i;
994
995 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
996 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
997 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
998 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
999 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1000 /* clear the rate counts */
1001 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1002 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1003
1004 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001005 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001006 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1007 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1008 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1009}
1010
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001011
1012/**
1013 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1014 *
1015 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1016 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1017 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1018 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001019 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1020 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1021 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
1022 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1023 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001024 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1025 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1026 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1027 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001028 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1029 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001030 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1031 * the frame.
1032 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1033 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001034 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001035 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1036 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1037 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001038 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1039 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1040 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001041 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1042 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001043 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001044 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001045 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001046 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1047 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001048 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1049 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001050 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1051 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1052 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001053 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1054 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1055 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001056 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1057 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1058 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1059 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1060 * on this subframe
1061 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1062 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001063 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1064 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001065 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001066 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1067 * processing it in any regular way.
1068 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1069 * them for sniffing purposes.
1070 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1071 * monitor interfaces.
1072 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1073 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001074 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001075 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1076 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001077 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1078 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1079 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1080 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1081 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1082 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1083 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1084 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1085 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001086 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1087 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1088 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001089 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1090 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1091 * the first subframe.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001092 */
1093enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001094 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1095 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001096 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001097 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1098 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1099 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1100 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001101 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001102 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1103 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1104 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1105 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1106 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1107 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1108 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001109 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001110 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001111 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1112 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1113 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1114 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001115 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001116 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001117 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001118 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1119 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001120 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001121 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1122 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001123 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001124 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001125 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1126 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001127};
1128
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001129#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1130
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001131/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001132 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1133 *
1134 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1135 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1136 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001137 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001138 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001139 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001140
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1142 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001143 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1144 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001145};
1146
1147/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001148 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1149 *
1150 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1151 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001152 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001153 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001154 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1155 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001156 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1157 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001158 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1159 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001160 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001161 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001162 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1163 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001164 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1165 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1166 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001167 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1168 * values were filled.
1169 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1170 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001171 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001172 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001173 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1174 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001175 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1176 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_\*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001177 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001178 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1179 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1180 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001181 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001182struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1183 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001184 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001185 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001186 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001187 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001188 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001189 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001190 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001191 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001192 u8 rx_flags;
1193 u8 band;
1194 u8 antenna;
1195 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001196 u8 chains;
1197 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001198 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001199};
1200
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001201/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001202 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1203 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1204 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1205 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1206 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1207 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1208 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1209 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1210 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1211 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1212 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1213 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1214 * @data field.
1215 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1216 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1217 * length
1218 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1219 *
1220 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1221 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1222 * data.
1223 */
1224struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1225 u32 present;
1226 u8 align;
1227 u8 oui[3];
1228 u8 subns;
1229 u8 pad;
1230 u16 len;
1231 u8 data[];
1232} __packed;
1233
1234/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001235 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1236 *
1237 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1238 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001239 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1240 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1241 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001242 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1243 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1244 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1245 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1246 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1247 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1248 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001249 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1250 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1251 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1252 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1253 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001254 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1255 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001256 */
1257enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001258 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001259 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001260 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001261 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001262};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001263
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001264
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001265/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001266 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1267 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001268 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001269 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001270 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001271 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001272 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001273 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001275 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001276 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1277 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001278 */
1279enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001280 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001281 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001282 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001283 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001284 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1285 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1286 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001287 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001288};
1289
1290/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001291 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1292 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001293 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1294 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1295 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1296 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1297 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001298 */
1299enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1300 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1301 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1302 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1303 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1304
1305 /* keep last */
1306 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1307};
1308
1309/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001310 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1311 *
1312 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1313 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001314 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1315 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001316 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001317 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1318 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1319 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001320 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1321 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1322 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1323 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001324 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1325 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001326 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001327 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001328 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001329 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001330 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001331 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1332 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001333 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001334 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1335 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001336 *
1337 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1338 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001339 * configured for an HT channel.
1340 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1341 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001342 */
1343struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001344 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001345 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001346
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001347 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001348 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001349
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001350 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1351
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001352 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001353 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001354 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001355};
1356
1357/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001358 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1359 *
1360 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1361 * operation.
1362 *
1363 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1364 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1365 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1366 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001367 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1368 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001369 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1370 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001371 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001372 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1373 */
1374struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1375 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001376 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001377 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001378 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001379 u8 count;
1380};
1381
1382/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001383 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1384 *
1385 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1386 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001387 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1388 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1389 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1390 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001391 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1392 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1393 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1394 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001395 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1396 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1397 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001398 */
1399enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1400 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001401 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001402 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001403 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001404};
1405
1406/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001407 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1408 *
1409 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1410 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1411 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001412 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001413 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1414 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001415 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001416 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1417 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001418 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1419 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1420 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001421 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001422 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1423 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1424 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1425 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001426 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1427 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001428 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1429 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1430 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1431 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1432 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001433 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001434 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001435 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001436 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1437 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001438 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001439 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001440 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001441 */
1442struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001443 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001444 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001445 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001446 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001447 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001448 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001449
1450 u8 cab_queue;
1451 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1452
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001453 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1454
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001455 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1456
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001457 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001458
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001459#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1460 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1461#endif
1462
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001463 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1464
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001465 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001466 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001467};
1468
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001469static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1470{
1471#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001472 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001473#endif
1474 return false;
1475}
1476
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001477/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001478 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1479 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1480 *
1481 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1482 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1483 *
1484 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1485 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1486 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1487 */
1488struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1489
1490/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001491 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1492 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1493 *
1494 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1495 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1496 *
1497 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1498 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1499 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1500 */
1501struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1502
1503/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001504 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1505 *
1506 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1507 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1508 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001509 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1510 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001511 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1512 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001513 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1514 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1515 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001516 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1517 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001518 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001519 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1520 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001521 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001522 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001523 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001524 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1525 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1526 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001527 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1528 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1529 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1530 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1531 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1532 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1533 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001534 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001535 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001536 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001537 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1538 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1539 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001540 */
1541enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001542 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1543 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1544 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1545 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1546 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1547 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1548 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001549 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001550};
1551
1552/**
1553 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1554 *
1555 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1556 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1557 *
1558 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1559 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001560 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001561 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001562 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1563 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001564 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1565 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1566 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001567 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1568 * data block:
1569 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1570 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1571 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001572 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1573 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001574 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001575struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001576 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001577 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001578 u8 icv_len;
1579 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001580 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001581 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001582 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001583 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001584 u8 key[0];
1585};
1586
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001587#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1588
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001589#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1590#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1591
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001592/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001593 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1594 *
1595 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1596 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1597 * reverse order than in packet)
1598 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1599 * reverse order than in packet)
1600 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1601 * reverse order than in packet)
1602 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1603 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001604 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001605 */
1606struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1607 union {
1608 struct {
1609 u32 iv32;
1610 u16 iv16;
1611 } tkip;
1612 struct {
1613 u8 pn[6];
1614 } ccmp;
1615 struct {
1616 u8 pn[6];
1617 } aes_cmac;
1618 struct {
1619 u8 pn[6];
1620 } aes_gmac;
1621 struct {
1622 u8 pn[6];
1623 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001624 struct {
1625 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1626 u8 seq_len;
1627 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001628 };
1629};
1630
1631/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001632 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1633 *
1634 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1635 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1636 *
1637 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1638 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1639 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1640 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1641 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1642 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1643 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1644 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1645 * key_idx value calculation:
1646 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1647 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1648 */
1649struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1650 u32 cipher;
1651 u16 iftype;
1652 u8 hdr_len;
1653 u8 pn_len;
1654 u8 pn_off;
1655 u8 key_idx_off;
1656 u8 key_idx_mask;
1657 u8 key_idx_shift;
1658 u8 mic_len;
1659};
1660
1661/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001662 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1663 *
1664 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1665 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1666 *
1667 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1668 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1669 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001670enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001671 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001672};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001673
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001674/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001675 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1676 *
1677 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1678 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1679 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1680 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1681 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1682 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1683 */
1684enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1685 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1686 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1687 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1688 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1689 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1690 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1691};
1692
1693/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001694 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1695 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1696 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1697 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1699 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1700 *
1701 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1702 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1703 */
1704enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1705 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1706 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1707 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1708 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1709};
1710
1711/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001712 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1713 *
1714 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001715 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001716 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1717 */
1718struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1719 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1720 struct {
1721 s8 idx;
1722 u8 count;
1723 u8 count_cts;
1724 u8 count_rts;
1725 u16 flags;
1726 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1727};
1728
1729/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001730 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1731 *
1732 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1733 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1734 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1735 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1736 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001737 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001738 *
1739 * @addr: MAC address
1740 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001741 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001742 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1743 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001744 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1745 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1746 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001747 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1748 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001749 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001750 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001751 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1752 * if wme is supported.
1753 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001754 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001755 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1756 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1757 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1758 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001759 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001760 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001761 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001762 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1763 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301764 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001765 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1766 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1767 * unlimited.
1768 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1769 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1770 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1771 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1772 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1773 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1774 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1775 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1776 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001777 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001778 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001779 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001780 */
1781struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001782 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001783 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1784 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001785 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001786 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001787 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001788 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001789 u8 uapsd_queues;
1790 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001791 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001792 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001793 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001794 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001795 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001796 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301797 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001798 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1799 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001800 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001801 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001802
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001803 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1804
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001805 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001806 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001807};
1808
1809/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001810 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1811 *
1812 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301813 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001814 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001815 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1816 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1817 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001818enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001819 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1820};
1821
1822/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001823 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1824 *
1825 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1826 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1827 */
1828struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1829 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1830};
1831
1832/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001833 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1834 *
1835 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1836 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1837 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1838 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001839 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001840 *
1841 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1842 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1843 */
1844struct ieee80211_txq {
1845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1846 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1847 u8 tid;
1848 u8 ac;
1849
1850 /* must be last */
1851 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1852};
1853
1854/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001855 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1856 *
1857 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1858 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1859 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1860 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1861 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1862 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001863 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1864 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1865 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1866 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1867 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1868 * algorithm.
1869 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1870 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1871 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1872 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1873 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1874 * CCK frames.
1875 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001876 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1877 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1878 * the FCS at the end.
1879 *
1880 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1881 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1882 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1883 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1884 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1885 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001886 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001887 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001888 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1889 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1890 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1891 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1892 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001893 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1894 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1895 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1896 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1897 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001898 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1899 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1900 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301901 *
1902 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1903 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001904 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001905 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1906 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1907 *
1908 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1909 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1910 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1911 *
1912 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1913 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001914 *
1915 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1916 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001917 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301918 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1919 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1920 * the stack.
1921 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001922 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001923 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1924 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001925 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001926 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1927 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1928 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001929 *
1930 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1931 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1932 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1933 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1934 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1935 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001936 *
1937 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1938 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1939 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1940 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1941 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1942 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001943 *
1944 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1945 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1946 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001947 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001948 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1949 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1950 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001951 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001952 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1953 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1954 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1955 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001956 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1957 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1958 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1959 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1960 * supported cipher suites.
1961 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001962 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1963 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1964 * for frames.
1965 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001966 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1967 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1968 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1969 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001970 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001971 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1972 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1973 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001974 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1975 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1976 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001977 *
1978 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1979 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001980 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001981 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1982 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1983 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1984 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1986 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1987 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1988 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001989 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001990 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1991 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1992 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001994 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001995 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1997 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1998 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2000 * within A-MPDU.
2001 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002002 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2003 * for sent beacons.
2004 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002005 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2006 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2007 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2008 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2009 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002010 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2011 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2012 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2013 * timeout.
2014 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002015 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2016 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2017 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002018 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2019 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2020 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2021 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2022 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2023 *
2024 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2025 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2026 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302027 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2028 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2029 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2030 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2031 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002032 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002033 */
2034enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002035 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2036 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2037 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2038 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2039 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2040 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2041 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2042 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2043 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2045 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2046 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2047 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2048 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2049 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2050 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2053 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2054 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2055 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2058 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2059 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2061 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2062 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2063 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002064 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002065 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002066 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002067 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002068 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002069 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002070 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302072 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002073
2074 /* keep last, obviously */
2075 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002076};
2077
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002078/**
2079 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002080 *
2081 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2082 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2083 *
2084 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2085 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2086 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002087 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2088 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002089 *
2090 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2091 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002092 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2093 * along with this structure.
2094 *
2095 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2096 *
2097 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2098 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2099 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002100 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2101 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002102 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002103 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002104 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002105 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002106 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002107 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002108 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002109 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002110 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2111 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2112 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002113 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2114 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2115 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002116 *
2117 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2118 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002119 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2120 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002121 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2122 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002123 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2124 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002125 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002126 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2127 * can handle.
2128 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2129 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002130 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002131 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002132 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2133 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2134 * aggregation.
2135 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2136 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2137 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002138 *
2139 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002140 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2141 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2142 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2143 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002144 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002145 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2146 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2147 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002148 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2149 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002150 *
2151 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2152 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002153 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002154 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002155 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002156 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2157 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002158 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002159 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002160 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2161 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2162 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2163 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2164 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2165 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2166 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2167 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002168 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002169 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2170 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002171 *
2172 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2173 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2174 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2175 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2176 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2177 * neither enabled.
2178 *
2179 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2180 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2181 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002182 *
2183 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2184 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2185 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002186 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2187 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002188 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002189struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002190 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002191 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002192 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002193 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002194 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002195 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002196 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002197 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002198 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002199 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002200 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002201 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002202 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002203 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002204 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002205 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002206 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002207 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002208 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002209 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002210 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002211 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002212 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002213 struct {
2214 int units_pos;
2215 s16 accuracy;
2216 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002217 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002218 u8 uapsd_queues;
2219 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002220 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2221 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002222 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002223};
2224
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002225static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2226 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2227{
2228 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2229}
2230#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2231
2232static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2233 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2234{
2235 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2236}
2237#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2238
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002239/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002240 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2241 *
2242 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2243 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2244 */
2245struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2246 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2247
2248 /* Keep last */
2249 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2250};
2251
2252/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002253 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2254 *
2255 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2256 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2257 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2258 * @status: channel-switch response status
2259 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2260 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2261 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2262 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2263 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2264 */
2265struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2266 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2267 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2268 u8 action_code;
2269 u32 status;
2270 u32 timestamp;
2271 u16 switch_time;
2272 u16 switch_timeout;
2273 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2274 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2275};
2276
2277/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002278 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2279 *
2280 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2281 *
2282 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2283 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2284 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2285 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2286 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002287 *
2288 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002289 */
2290struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2291
2292/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002293 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2294 *
2295 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2296 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2297 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002298static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2299{
2300 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2301}
2302
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002303/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002304 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002305 *
2306 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2307 * @addr: the address to set
2308 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002309static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002310{
2311 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2312}
2313
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002314static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2315ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002316 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002317{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002318 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002319 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002320 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002321}
2322
2323static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2324ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002325 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002326{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002327 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002328 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002329 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002330}
2331
2332static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2333ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002334 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002335{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002336 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002337 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002338 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002339}
2340
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002341/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002342 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2343 * @hw: the hardware
2344 * @skb: the skb
2345 *
2346 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2347 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2348 */
2349void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2350
2351/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002352 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002353 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002354 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2355 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2356 *
2357 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2358 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002359 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2360 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2361 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002362 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2363 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2364 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002365 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2366 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2367 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2368 *
2369 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2370 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2371 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2372 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2373 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002374 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2375 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2376 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2377 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2378 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002379 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2380 *
2381 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2382 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2383 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2384 * based on the receive flags.
2385 *
2386 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2387 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2388 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2389 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002390 *
2391 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2392 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2393 * handler.
2394 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002395 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002396 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2397 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002398 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002399 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002400 *
2401 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2402 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2403 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002404 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002405
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002406/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002407 * DOC: Powersave support
2408 *
2409 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2410 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002411 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2412 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2413 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2414 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2415 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2416 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2417 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2418 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002419 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002420 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2421 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2422 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002423 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2424 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002425 *
2426 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2427 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2428 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002429 *
2430 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2431 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2432 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2433 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002434 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2435 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002436 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002437 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002438 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2439 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2440 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2441 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2442 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2443 * periods.
2444 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002445 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002446 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2447 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2448 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2449 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2450 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2451 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2452 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2453 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2454 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2455 *
2456 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002457 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002458 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002459 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2460 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2461 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2462 *
2463 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2464 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002465 */
2466
2467/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002468 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2469 *
2470 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002471 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002472 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2473 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2474 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2475 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2476 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2477 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002478 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2479 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002480 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2481 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2482 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2483 *
2484 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2485 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2486 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2487 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2488 *
2489 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2490 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2491 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2492 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002493 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002494 * - a list of information element IDs
2495 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2496 *
2497 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2498 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2499 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2500 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2501 * vendor information elements.
2502 *
2503 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2504 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2505 *
2506 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2507 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2508 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2509 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2510 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2511 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2512 *
2513 *
2514 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2515 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2516 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2517 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2518 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2519 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2520 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2521 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2522 *
2523 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2524 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2525 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002526 */
2527
2528/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002529 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2530 *
2531 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2532 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2533 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2534 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2535 *
2536 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2537 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2538 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2539 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2540 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2541 * hardware flags.
2542 *
2543 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2544 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2545 * turned off otherwise.
2546 *
2547 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2548 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2549 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2550 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2551 */
2552
2553/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002554 * DOC: Frame filtering
2555 *
2556 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2557 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2558 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2559 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2560 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2561 *
2562 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2563 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2564 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2565 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002566 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2567 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2568 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2569 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2570 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2571 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2572 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002573 *
2574 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2575 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2576 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2577 * or dropped.
2578 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002579 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2580 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2581 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2582 * the flag, but not clear it.
2583 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2584 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2585 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2586 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2587 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2588 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2589 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2590 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002591 */
2592
2593/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002594 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2595 *
2596 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2597 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2598 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2599 *
2600 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2601 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2602 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2603 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2604 * the driver code.
2605 *
2606 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2607 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2608 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2609 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2610 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2611 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2612 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2613 *
2614 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2615 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2616 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2617 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2618 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2619 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2620 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2621 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2622 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2623 * @sta_notify callback.
2624 *
2625 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2626 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2627 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2628 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2629 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2630 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2631 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002632 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002633 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2634 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2635 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2636 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2637 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2638 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2639 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002640 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2641 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2642 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002643 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2644 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2645 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2646 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2647 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2648 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2649 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2650 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2651 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2652 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2653 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2654 *
2655 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2656 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2657 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2658 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2659 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2660 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2661 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2662 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2663 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2664 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002665 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002666 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2667 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2668 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2669 *
2670 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2671 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2672 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2673 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2674 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002675 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002676 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2677 *
2678 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2679 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2680 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2681 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002682 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002683 *
2684 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2685 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2686 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2687 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002688 */
2689
2690/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002691 * DOC: HW queue control
2692 *
2693 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2694 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2695 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2696 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2697 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2698 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2699 *
2700 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2701 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2702 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2703 *
2704 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2705 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2706 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2707 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2708 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2709 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2710 * the hardware queue.
2711 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2712 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2713 *
2714 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2715 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2716 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2717 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2718 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2719 *
2720 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2721 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2722 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2723 * off-channel queue: 9
2724 *
2725 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2726 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2727 *
2728 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2729 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2730 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2731 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2732 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2733 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2734 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2735 *
2736 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2737 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2738 *
2739 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2740 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2741 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2742 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2743 */
2744
2745/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002746 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2747 *
2748 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2749 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2750 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2751 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2752 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002753 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2754 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2755 * multicast address.
2756 *
2757 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2758 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2759 *
2760 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2761 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2762 *
2763 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2764 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2765 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2766 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2767 * honour this flag if possible.
2768 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002769 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2770 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002771 *
2772 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002773 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002774 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002775 *
2776 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002777 */
2778enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002779 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2780 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2781 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2782 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2783 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2784 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002785 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002786 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002787};
2788
2789/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002790 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2791 *
2792 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2793 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002794 *
2795 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2796 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002797 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002798 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2799 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002800 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2801 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2802 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002803 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002804 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2805 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2806 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2807 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2808 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2809 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2810 * session is gone and removes the station.
2811 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2812 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2813 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2814 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002815 */
2816enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2817 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2818 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002819 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002820 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2821 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2822 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002823 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002824};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002825
2826/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002827 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2828 *
2829 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2830 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2831 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2832 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2833 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2834 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2835 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2836 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2837 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2838 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2839 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2840 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2841 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2842 */
2843struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2844 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2845 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2846 u16 tid;
2847 u16 ssn;
2848 u8 buf_size;
2849 bool amsdu;
2850 u16 timeout;
2851};
2852
2853/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002854 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2855 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002856 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2857 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002858 */
2859enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2860 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002861 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002862};
2863
2864/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002865 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2866 *
2867 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002868 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2869 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2870 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002871 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002872 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2873 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2874 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002875 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2876 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002877 */
2878enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2879 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2880 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002881 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002882 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002883};
2884
2885/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002886 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2887 *
2888 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2889 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2890 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2891 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2892 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2893 *
2894 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2895 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2896 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2897 */
2898enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2899 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2900 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2901};
2902
2903/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002904 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2905 *
2906 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2907 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2908 *
2909 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2910 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2911 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2912 * of wowlan configuration)
2913 */
2914enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2915 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2916 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2917};
2918
2919/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002920 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2921 *
2922 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2923 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2924 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2925 *
2926 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2927 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2928 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002929 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002930 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002931 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002932 *
2933 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2934 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2935 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2936 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2937 * or zero.
2938 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2939 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2940 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002941 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002942 *
2943 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2944 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2945 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2946 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002947 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2948 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002949 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002950 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002951 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2952 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2953 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2954 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2955 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002956 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2957 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2958 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2959 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002960 *
2961 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2962 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2963 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2964 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2965 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2966 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002967 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2968 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2969 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2970 * in suspend().
2971 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002972 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002973 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002974 * and @stop must be implemented.
2975 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2976 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2977 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2978 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2979 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002980 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002981 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002982 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2983 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2984 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2985 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2986 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2987 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002988 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2989 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2990 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2991 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2992 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2993 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2994 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002995 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002996 *
2997 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2998 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002999 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003000 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003001 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003002 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3003 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3004 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3005 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3006 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003007 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3008 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003009 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003010 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3011 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3012 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3013 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003014 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3015 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003016 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003018 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3019 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3020 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3021 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3022 * which flags are changed.
3023 * This callback can sleep.
3024 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003025 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003026 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003027 *
3028 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003029 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3030 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003031 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003032 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003033 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003034 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003035 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3036 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3037 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003038 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003039 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003040 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3041 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3042 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3043 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3044 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3045 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003046 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3047 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3048 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003050 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003051 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003052 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3053 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003054 * that power save is disabled.
3055 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3056 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3057 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3058 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3059 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3060 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3061 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003062 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003063 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003064 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3065 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3066 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3067 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3068 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3069 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3070 * The callback can sleep.
3071 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003072 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3073 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3074 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3075 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3076 *
3077 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003078 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003079 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003080 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3081 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003082 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3083 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3084 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003085 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003086 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3087 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3088 * this notification.
3089 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003090 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003091 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3092 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003093 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003094 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003095 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3096 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3097 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003098 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003099 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003100 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3101 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
3102 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
3103 * The callback can sleep.
3104 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003105 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003106 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003107 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003108 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3109 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3110 *
3111 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003112 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3113 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3114 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3115 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3116 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003117 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303118 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3119 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003120 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3121 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303122 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003123 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003124 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3125 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3126 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003127 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003128 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3129 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3130 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3131 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003132 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3133 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3134 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3135 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3136 * The callback can sleep.
3137 *
3138 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3139 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3140 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3141 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3142 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003143 * The callback can sleep.
3144 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003145 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3146 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3147 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3148 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3149 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3150 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3151 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003152 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3153 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3154 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003155 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003156 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3157 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3158 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3159 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3160 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3161 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3162 * The callback can sleep.
3163 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003164 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003165 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003166 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003167 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003168 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003169 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003170 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003171 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003172 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003173 *
3174 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003175 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003176 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003177 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003178 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003179 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3180 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3181 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3182 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3183 * The callback can sleep.
3184 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003185 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3186 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3187 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3188 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003189 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003190 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003191 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3192 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3193 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003194 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003195 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003196 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003197 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3198 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3199 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003200 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003201 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003202 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003203 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3204 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3205 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3206 * - TX: 1.....7
3207 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3208 * - TX: 8..1...
3209 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3210 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3211 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3212 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3213 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003214 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003215 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003216 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003217 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3218 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003219 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3220 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3221 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003222 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003223 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003224 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3225 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003226 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3227 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3228 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003229 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003230 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3231 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003232 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003233 *
3234 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003235 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3236 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3237 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3238 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003239 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003240 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003241 *
3242 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3243 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3244 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3245 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003246 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003247 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3248 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3249 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3250 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3251 *
3252 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003253 *
3254 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3255 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3256 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3257 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3258 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3259 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003260 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003261 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3262 * must be accepted in this case.
3263 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003264 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3265 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003266 *
3267 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3268 *
3269 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303270 *
3271 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3272 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303273 *
3274 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3275 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3276 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003277 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3278 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003279 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003280 *
3281 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3282 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3283 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3284 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003285 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003286 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3287 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3288 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3289 * more-data bit must always be set.
3290 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3291 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003292 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3293 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3294 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3295 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3296 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3297 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003298 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3299 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3300 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003301 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3302 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003303 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003304 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003305 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003306 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3307 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3308 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003309 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003310 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3311 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3312 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3313 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003314 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003315 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003316 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3317 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3318 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003319 *
3320 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3321 *
3322 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3323 *
3324 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3325 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3326 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003327 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3328 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3329 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3330 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3331 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3332 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3333 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3334 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3335 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3336 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3337 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3338 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003339 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003340 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3341 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3342 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3343 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3344 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3345 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3346 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3347 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3348 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003349 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303350 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003351 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303352 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003353 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3354 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3355 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303356 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003357 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3358 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303359 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003360 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3361 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303362 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003363 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3364 * another, as specified in the list of
3365 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3366 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303367 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003368 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003369 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3370 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3371 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3372 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3373 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3374 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3375 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003376 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003377 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3378 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3379 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3380 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3381 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003382 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003383 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3384 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3385 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003386 *
3387 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3388 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3389 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003390 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003391 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3392 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003393 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003394 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003395 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3396 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003397 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3398 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3399 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3400 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003401 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3402 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3403 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003404 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003405 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3406 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3407 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3408 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003409 *
3410 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3411 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3412 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003413 *
3414 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3415 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003416 *
3417 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3418 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3419 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3420 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3421 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3422 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3423 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3424 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3425 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003426 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3427 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3428 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3429 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3430 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3431 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3432 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003433 *
3434 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003435 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3436 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3437 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3438 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003439 *
3440 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3441 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003442 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3443 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3444 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3445 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3446 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3447 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003448 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3449 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3450 * this call.
3451 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3452 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3453 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003454 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003455struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003456 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3457 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3458 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003459 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003460 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003461#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3462 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3463 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003464 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003465#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003466 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003468 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3469 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003470 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003471 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003472 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003473 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003474 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3476 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3477 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003478
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003479 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3480 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3481
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003482 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003483 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003484 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3485 unsigned int changed_flags,
3486 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003487 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003488 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3490 unsigned int filter_flags,
3491 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003492 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3493 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003494 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003496 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003497 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3499 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3500 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3501 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003502 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3504 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003505 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003507 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003508 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003509 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003511 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3513 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003514 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003515 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003516 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003517 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 const u8 *mac_addr);
3520 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003522 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3523 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003524 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3526 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003527 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003528 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003529 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3530 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3531 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303533#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3534 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3535 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3536 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3537 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303538#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003539 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003540 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003541 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3542 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3543 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3544 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003545 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3547 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003548 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3550 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3551 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003552 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3554 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003555 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3556 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3557 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3558 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003559 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003561 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003562 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3563 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3564 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003565 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3566 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003567 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003568 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003569 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003571 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003572 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3573 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003574 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003575 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003576#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003577 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3578 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003579 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3580 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3581 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003582#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003583 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3584 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003585 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003586 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003587 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003588 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3589 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003590
3591 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003592 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003593 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003594 int duration,
3595 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003596 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003597 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3598 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3599 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303600 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303601 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3602 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003603 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3605 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003606
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003607 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3608 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3609 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3610 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3611 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003612 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3613 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3614 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3615 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3616 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003617
3618 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3619 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3620 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3621 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3622 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3623 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3624 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3625 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003626
3627 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003629
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003630 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3631 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3632
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003633 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3634 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3635 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3636 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3637 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3638 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3639 u32 changed);
3640 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3641 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3642 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3643 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3645 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003646 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3647 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3648 int n_vifs,
3649 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003650
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003651 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003653
3654#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3655 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3656 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3657 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3658#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003659 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3660 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3661 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003662 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3663 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3664 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003665
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003666 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3668
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003669 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3670 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003671 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3672 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003673 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3674 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003675
3676 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3678 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3679 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003680 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003681 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3683 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003684 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3685 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3686 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003687
3688 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3689 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003690 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003691
3692 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3694 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3695 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3696 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003697 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3698 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3699 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003700 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3701 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3702 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3703 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3704 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3705 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003706};
3707
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003708/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003709 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3710 *
3711 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3712 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3713 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3714 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3715 * @priv_data_len.
3716 *
3717 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3718 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3719 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3720 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3721 *
3722 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3723 */
3724struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3725 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3726 const char *requested_name);
3727
3728/**
3729 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003730 *
3731 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3732 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3733 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3734 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3735 * @priv_data_len.
3736 *
3737 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3738 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003739 *
3740 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003741 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003742static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003743struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003744 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3745{
3746 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3747}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003748
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003749/**
3750 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3751 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003752 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3753 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3754 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003755 *
3756 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003757 *
3758 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003759 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003760int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3761
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003762/**
3763 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3764 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3765 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3766 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3767 */
3768struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3769 int throughput;
3770 int blink_time;
3771};
3772
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003773/**
3774 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3775 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3776 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3777 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3778 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3779 */
3780enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3781 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3782 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3783 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3784};
3785
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003786#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003787const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3788const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3789const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3790const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3791const char *
3792__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3793 unsigned int flags,
3794 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3795 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003796#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003797/**
3798 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3799 *
3800 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3801 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3802 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3803 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3804 *
3805 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003806 *
3807 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003808 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003809static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003810{
3811#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3812 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3813#else
3814 return NULL;
3815#endif
3816}
3817
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003818/**
3819 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3820 *
3821 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3822 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3823 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3824 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3825 *
3826 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003827 *
3828 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003829 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003830static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003831{
3832#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3833 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3834#else
3835 return NULL;
3836#endif
3837}
3838
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003839/**
3840 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3841 *
3842 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3843 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3844 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3845 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3846 *
3847 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003848 *
3849 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003850 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003851static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003852{
3853#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3854 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3855#else
3856 return NULL;
3857#endif
3858}
3859
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003860/**
3861 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3862 *
3863 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3864 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3865 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3866 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3867 *
3868 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003869 *
3870 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003871 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003872static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003873{
3874#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3875 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3876#else
3877 return NULL;
3878#endif
3879}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003880
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003881/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003882 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3883 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003884 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003885 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3886 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3887 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003888 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3889 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3890 *
3891 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003892 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003893static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003894ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003895 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3896 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3897{
3898#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003899 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003900 blink_table_len);
3901#else
3902 return NULL;
3903#endif
3904}
3905
3906/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003907 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3908 *
3909 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3910 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3911 *
3912 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3913 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003914void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3915
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003916/**
3917 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3918 *
3919 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3920 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003921 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003922 *
3923 * @hw: the hardware to free
3924 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003925void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3926
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003927/**
3928 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3929 *
3930 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3931 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3932 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3933 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3934 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3935 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3936 *
3937 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3938 */
3939void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3940
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003941/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003942 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003943 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003944 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3945 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3946 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3947 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3948 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3949 *
3950 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3951 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3952 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3953 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3954 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3955 *
3956 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3957 *
3958 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003959 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003960 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3961 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003962 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003963void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3964 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003965
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003966/**
3967 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3968 *
3969 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003970 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3971 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3972 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3973 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003974 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003975 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003976 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3977 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003978 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3979 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003980 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003981 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003982 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003983 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3984 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003985 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003986static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3987{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003988 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003989}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003990
3991/**
3992 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3993 *
3994 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003995 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3996 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003997 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003998 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3999 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004000 *
4001 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4002 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004003 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004004void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004005
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004006/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004007 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4008 *
4009 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4010 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4011 *
4012 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004013 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4014 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004015 *
4016 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4017 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4018 */
4019static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4020 struct sk_buff *skb)
4021{
4022 local_bh_disable();
4023 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4024 local_bh_enable();
4025}
4026
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004027/**
4028 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4029 *
4030 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4031 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4032 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4033 *
4034 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4035 *
4036 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4037 * each other.
4038 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004039 * @sta: currently connected sta
4040 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004041 *
4042 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004043 */
4044int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4045
4046/**
4047 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4048 * (in process context)
4049 *
4050 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4051 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4052 * applies.
4053 *
4054 * @sta: currently connected sta
4055 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004056 *
4057 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004058 */
4059static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4060 bool start)
4061{
4062 int ret;
4063
4064 local_bh_disable();
4065 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4066 local_bh_enable();
4067
4068 return ret;
4069}
4070
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004071/**
4072 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4073 * @sta: currently connected station
4074 *
4075 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4076 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4077 * connected station was received.
4078 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4079 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4080 * be serialized.
4081 */
4082void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4083
4084/**
4085 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4086 * @sta: currently connected station
4087 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4088 *
4089 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4090 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4091 * from a connected station was received.
4092 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4093 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4094 * serialized.
4095 */
4096void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4097
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004098/*
4099 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4100 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4101 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004102#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004103
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004104/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004105 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004106 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004107 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4108 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004109 *
4110 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004111 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4112 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004113 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004114 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4115 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4116 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4117 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4118 *
4119 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4120 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4121 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4122 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4123 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4124 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4125 *
4126 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4127 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4128 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4129 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4130 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004131 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004132void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4133 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004134
4135/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004136 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4137 *
4138 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4139 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4140 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4141 *
4142 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4143 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4144 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4145 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4146 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4147 */
4148void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4149 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4150 struct sk_buff *skb,
4151 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4152 int max_rates);
4153
4154/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004155 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4156 *
4157 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4158 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4159 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4160 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004161 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4162 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004163 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004164 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4165 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004166 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004167 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4168 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004170void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004171 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004172
4173/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004174 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4175 *
4176 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4177 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4178 * specific skbs.
4179 *
4180 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4181 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4182 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4183 *
4184 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4185 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4186 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4187 * @info: tx status information
4188 */
4189void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4191 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4192
4193/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004194 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4195 *
4196 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4197 *
4198 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4199 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4200 * for a single hardware.
4201 *
4202 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4203 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4204 */
4205static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206 struct sk_buff *skb)
4207{
4208 local_bh_disable();
4209 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4210 local_bh_enable();
4211}
4212
4213/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004214 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004215 *
4216 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4217 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4218 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004219 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4220 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004221 *
4222 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4223 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004224 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004225void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004226 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004227
4228/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004229 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4230 *
4231 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4232 * connected STA.
4233 *
4234 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4235 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4236 */
4237void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4238
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004239#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4240
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004241/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004242 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4243 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4244 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004245 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4246 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4247 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004248 */
4249struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4250 u16 tim_offset;
4251 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004252
4253 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004254};
4255
4256/**
4257 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4258 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4259 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4260 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4261 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4262 *
4263 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4264 * obtain the beacon template.
4265 *
4266 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4267 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004268 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4269 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004270 *
4271 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4272 *
4273 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4274 */
4275struct sk_buff *
4276ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4277 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4278 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4279
4280/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004281 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4282 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004283 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004284 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4285 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4286 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4287 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4288 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4289 *
4290 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004291 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004292 *
4293 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4294 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004295 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4296 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004297 *
4298 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004299 *
4300 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004301 */
4302struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4303 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4304 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4305
4306/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004307 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4308 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004309 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004310 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004311 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004312 *
4313 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004314 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004315static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4317{
4318 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4319}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004320
4321/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004322 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4323 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4324 *
4325 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4326 * This function is called implicitly when
4327 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4328 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4329 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4330 *
4331 * Return: new csa counter value
4332 */
4333u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4334
4335/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004336 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4337 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4338 *
4339 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004340 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004341 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4342 */
4343void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4344
4345/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004346 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004347 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4348 *
4349 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4350 */
4351bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4352
4353
4354/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004355 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4356 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4357 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4358 *
4359 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4360 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4361 *
4362 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004363 *
4364 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004365 */
4366struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4368
4369/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004370 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4371 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4373 *
4374 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4375 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4376 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4377 *
4378 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4379 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004380 *
4381 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004382 */
4383struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4384 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4385
4386/**
4387 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4388 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4389 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4390 *
4391 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4392 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4393 * BSSID and address is used.
4394 *
4395 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4396 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004397 *
4398 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004399 */
4400struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4401 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4402
4403/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004404 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4405 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004406 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004407 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4408 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004409 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004410 *
4411 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4412 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004413 *
4414 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004415 */
4416struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004417 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004418 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004419 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004420
4421/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004422 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4423 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004424 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004425 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4426 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004427 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004428 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4429 *
4430 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4431 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4432 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4433 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4434 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004435void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004436 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004437 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004438 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4439
4440/**
4441 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4442 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004443 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004444 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004445 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004446 *
4447 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4448 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4449 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004450 *
4451 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004452 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004453__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4454 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004455 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004456
4457/**
4458 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4459 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004460 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004461 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4462 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004463 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004464 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4465 *
4466 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4467 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4468 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4469 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4470 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004471void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4472 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004473 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004474 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004475 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4476
4477/**
4478 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4479 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004480 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004481 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004482 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004483 *
4484 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4485 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4486 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004487 *
4488 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004489 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004490__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004492 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004493 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004494
4495/**
4496 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4497 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004498 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004499 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004500 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004501 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004502 *
4503 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4504 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004505 *
4506 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004507 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004508__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004510 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004511 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004512 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004513
4514/**
4515 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4516 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004517 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004518 *
4519 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4520 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4521 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4522 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004523 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4524 *
4525 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4526 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004527 *
4528 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4529 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4530 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4531 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4532 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4533 * use common code for all beacons.
4534 */
4535struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004536ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004537
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004538/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004539 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4540 *
4541 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4542 *
4543 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4544 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4545 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4546 */
4547void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4548 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4549
4550/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004551 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004552 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004553 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4554 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004555 *
4556 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004557 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4558 * with this P1K
4559 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004560 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004561static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4562 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4563{
4564 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4565 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4566 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4567
4568 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4569}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004570
4571/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004572 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4573 *
4574 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4575 * and transmitter address.
4576 *
4577 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4578 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4579 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4580 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4581 */
4582void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4583 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4584
4585/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004586 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4587 *
4588 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4589 * in the packet.
4590 *
4591 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4592 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4593 * encrypted with this key
4594 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4595 */
4596void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4597 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004598
4599/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004600 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4601 *
4602 * @pos: start of crypto header
4603 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4604 * @pn: PN to add
4605 *
4606 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4607 * the packet payload)
4608 *
4609 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4610 * point to the crypto header)
4611 */
4612u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4613
4614/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004615 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4616 *
4617 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004618 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004619 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4620 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4621 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4622 *
4623 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4624 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4625 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4626 *
4627 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4628 * can be done concurrently.
4629 */
4630void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4631 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4632
4633/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004634 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4635 *
4636 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004637 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004638 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4639 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4640 * @seq: new sequence data
4641 *
4642 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4643 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4644 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4645 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4646 *
4647 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4648 * can be done concurrently.
4649 */
4650void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4651 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4652
4653/**
4654 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4655 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4656 *
4657 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4658 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4659 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4660 *
4661 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4662 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4663 */
4664void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4665
4666/**
4667 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4668 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4669 * @keyconf: new key data
4670 *
4671 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4672 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4673 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4674 *
4675 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4676 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4677 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4678 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4679 *
4680 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4681 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4682 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4683 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4684 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4685 * of the reconfiguration.
4686 *
4687 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4688 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4689 *
4690 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4691 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4692 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4693 * the key that's being replaced.
4694 */
4695struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4696ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4697 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4698
4699/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004700 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4701 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4702 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4703 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4704 * @gfp: allocation flags
4705 */
4706void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4707 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4708
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004709/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004710 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4711 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4712 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4713 *
4714 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4715 */
4716void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4717
4718/**
4719 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4720 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4721 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4722 *
4723 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4724 */
4725void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4726
4727/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004728 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4729 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4730 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4731 *
4732 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004733 *
4734 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004735 */
4736
4737int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4738
4739/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004740 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4741 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4742 *
4743 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4744 */
4745void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4746
4747/**
4748 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4749 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4750 *
4751 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4752 */
4753void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4754
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004755/**
4756 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4757 *
4758 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4759 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004760 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4761 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004762 *
4763 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004764 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004765 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004766void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4767 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004768
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004769/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004770 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4771 *
4772 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4773 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4774 *
4775 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4776 */
4777void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4778
4779/**
4780 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4781 *
4782 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4783 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4784 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4785 * while associating, for instance.
4786 *
4787 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4788 */
4789void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4790
4791/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004792 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4793 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4794 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4795 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4796 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4797 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4798 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4799 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004800 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004801 */
4802enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4803 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4804 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004805 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004806};
4807
4808/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004809 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4810 *
4811 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4812 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4813 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4814 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4815 *
4816 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4817 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4818 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4819 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4820 */
4821void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4822 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4824 void *data);
4825
4826/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004827 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004828 *
4829 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4830 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004831 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4832 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4833 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004834 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004835 *
4836 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004837 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004838 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004839 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4840 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004841static inline void
4842ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4843 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4845 void *data)
4846{
4847 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4848 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4849 iterator, data);
4850}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004851
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004852/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004853 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4854 *
4855 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4856 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4857 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4858 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004859 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004860 *
4861 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004862 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004863 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4864 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4865 */
4866void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004867 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004868 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4869 u8 *mac,
4870 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4871 void *data);
4872
4873/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004874 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4875 *
4876 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4877 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4878 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4879 *
4880 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4881 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4882 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4883 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4884 */
4885void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4886 u32 iter_flags,
4887 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4888 u8 *mac,
4889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4890 void *data);
4891
4892/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004893 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4894 *
4895 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4896 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4897 * function for them.
4898 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4899 *
4900 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4901 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4902 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4903 */
4904void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4905 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4906 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4907 void *data);
4908/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004909 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4910 *
4911 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4912 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4913 *
4914 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4915 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4916 */
4917void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4918
4919/**
4920 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4921 *
4922 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4923 * workqueue.
4924 *
4925 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4926 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4927 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4928 */
4929void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4930 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4931 unsigned long delay);
4932
4933/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004934 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004935 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004936 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304937 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004938 *
4939 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004940 *
4941 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4942 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4943 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4944 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304945int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4946 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004947
4948/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004949 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004950 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004951 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4952 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4953 *
4954 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004955 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4956 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004957 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004958void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004959 u16 tid);
4960
4961/**
4962 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004963 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004964 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004965 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004966 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004967 *
4968 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4969 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4970 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4971 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004972int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004973
4974/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004975 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004976 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004977 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4978 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4979 *
4980 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004981 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4982 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004983 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004984void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004985 u16 tid);
4986
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004987/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004988 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4989 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004990 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004991 * @addr: station's address
4992 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004993 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4994 *
4995 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004996 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4997 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004998struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004999 const u8 *addr);
5000
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005001/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005002 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005003 *
5004 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005005 * @addr: remote station's address
5006 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005007 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005008 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5009 *
5010 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005011 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5012 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005013 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5014 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5015 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5016 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5017 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5018 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5019 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005020 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005021 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005022 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005023struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5024 const u8 *addr,
5025 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005026
5027/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005028 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5029 * @hw: the hardware
5030 * @pubsta: the station
5031 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5032 *
5033 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5034 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5035 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5036 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5037 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5038 *
5039 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5040 * manner.
5041 *
5042 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5043 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5044 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5045 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5046 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5047 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5048 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5049 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5050 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5051 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5052 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5053 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5054 * woke up while blocked or not.
5055 */
5056void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5057 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5058
5059/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005060 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5061 * @pubsta: the station
5062 *
5063 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5064 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5065 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5066 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5067 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005068 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5069 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5070 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5071 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5072 *
5073 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5074 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5075 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5076 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005077 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005078void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005079
5080/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005081 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5082 * @pubsta: the station
5083 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5084 *
5085 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5086 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5087 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5088 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5089 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5090 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5091 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5092 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5093 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5094 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5095 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5096 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5097 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5098 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5099 */
5100void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5101
5102/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005103 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5104 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5105 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5106 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5107 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5108 *
5109 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5110 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5111 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5112 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5113 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5114 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005115 *
5116 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5117 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5118 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005119 */
5120void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5122 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5124 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5125 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5126 void *data),
5127 void *iter_data);
5128
5129/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005130 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5131 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5132 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5133 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5134 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5135 *
5136 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5137 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5138 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5139 * in removal process will be skipped.
5140 *
5141 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5142 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5143 */
5144void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5145 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5146 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5147 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5148 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5149 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5150 void *data),
5151 void *iter_data);
5152
5153/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005154 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5155 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5156 * @iter: iterator function
5157 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5158 *
5159 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5160 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5161 * places while calling into the driver.
5162 *
5163 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5164 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5165 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005166 *
5167 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5168 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5169 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5170 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005171 */
5172void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5173 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5174 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5175 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5176 void *data),
5177 void *iter_data);
5178
5179/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005180 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5181 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5182 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5183 *
5184 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5185 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5186 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5187 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5188 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005189 * %NULL.
5190 *
5191 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005192 */
5193struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5194 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5195
5196/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005197 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5198 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005199 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005200 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005201 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005202 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005203 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5204 */
5205void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005206
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005207/**
5208 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5209 *
5210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5211 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005212 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005213 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5214 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005215 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5216 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005217 *
5218 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5219 * without connection recovery attempts.
5220 */
5221void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5222
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005223/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005224 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5225 *
5226 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5227 *
5228 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5229 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5230 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5231 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5232 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5233 *
5234 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5235 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5236 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5237 * disconnect normally later.
5238 *
5239 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5240 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5241 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5242 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5243 */
5244void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5245
5246/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005247 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5248 * rssi threshold triggered
5249 *
5250 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5251 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5252 * @gfp: context flags
5253 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005254 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005255 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5256 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5257 */
5258void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5259 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5260 gfp_t gfp);
5261
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005262/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005263 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5264 *
5265 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5266 * @gfp: context flags
5267 */
5268void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5269
5270/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005271 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5272 *
5273 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5274 */
5275void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5276
5277/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005278 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5279 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5280 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5281 *
5282 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5283 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5284 */
5285void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5286
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005287/**
5288 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5289 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005290 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005291 *
5292 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5293 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5294 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5295 */
5296void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5297 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5298
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005299/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005300 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5301 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5302 */
5303void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5304
5305/**
5306 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5307 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5308 */
5309void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5310
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005311/**
5312 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5313 *
5314 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5315 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5316 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5317 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5318 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5319 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5320 *
5321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5322 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5323 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5324 */
5325void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5326 const u8 *addr);
5327
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005328/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005329 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5330 * @pubsta: station struct
5331 * @tid: the session's TID
5332 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5333 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5334 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5335 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5336 *
5337 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5338 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5339 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5340 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5341 */
5342void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5343 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5344 u16 received_mpdus);
5345
5346/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005347 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5348 *
5349 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5350 * buffer.
5351 *
5352 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5353 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5354 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5355 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5356 */
5357void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5358
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005359/**
5360 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5361 *
5362 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5363 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5364 * reordering.
5365 *
5366 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5367 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5368 *
5369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5370 * @addr: station mac address
5371 * @tid: the rx tid
5372 */
5373void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5374 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5375
5376/**
5377 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5378 *
5379 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5380 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5381 * reordering.
5382 *
5383 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5384 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5385 *
5386 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5387 * @addr: station mac address
5388 * @tid: the rx tid
5389 */
5390void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5391 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5392
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005393/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005394
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005395/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005396 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005397 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005398 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5399 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5400 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005401 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5402 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005403 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5404 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5405 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5406 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5407 * RTS threshold
5408 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5409 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005410 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005411 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5412 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005413 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005414 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005415 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005416 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005417struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5418 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5419 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5420 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5421 struct sk_buff *skb;
5422 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5423 bool rts, short_preamble;
5424 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005425 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005426 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005427 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005428};
5429
5430struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005431 const char *name;
5432 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005433 void (*free)(void *priv);
5434
5435 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5436 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005437 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005438 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305439 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005440 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005441 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5442 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005443 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5444 void *priv_sta);
5445
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005446 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5447 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5449 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005450 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5451 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5452 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005453 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5454 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005455
5456 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5457 struct dentry *dir);
5458 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005459
5460 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005461};
5462
5463static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005464 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005465 int index)
5466{
5467 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5468}
5469
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005470/**
5471 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5472 *
5473 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5474 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5475 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5476 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5477 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5478 * not null.
5479 *
5480 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5481 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5482 *
5483 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5484 * that this may be null.
5485 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5486 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5487 */
5488bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5489 void *priv_sta,
5490 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5491
5492
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005493static inline s8
5494rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5496{
5497 int i;
5498
5499 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5500 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5501 return i;
5502
5503 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005504 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005505
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005506 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005507 return 0;
5508}
5509
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005510static inline
5511bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5512 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5513{
5514 unsigned int i;
5515
5516 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5517 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5518 return true;
5519 return false;
5520}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005521
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005522/**
5523 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5524 *
5525 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5526 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5527 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5528 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5529 *
5530 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5531 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5532 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5533 */
5534int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5535 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5536 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5537
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005538int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5539void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005540
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005541static inline bool
5542conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5543{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005544 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005545}
5546
5547static inline bool
5548conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5549{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005550 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5551 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005552}
5553
5554static inline bool
5555conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5556{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005557 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5558 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005559}
5560
5561static inline bool
5562conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5563{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005564 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005565}
5566
5567static inline bool
5568conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5569{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005570 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5571 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5572 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005573}
5574
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005575static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5576ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5577{
5578 if (p2p) {
5579 switch (type) {
5580 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5581 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5582 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5583 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5584 default:
5585 break;
5586 }
5587 }
5588 return type;
5589}
5590
5591static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5592ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5593{
5594 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5595}
5596
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005597/**
5598 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5599 *
5600 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5601 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5602 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5603 *
5604 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5605 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5606 * matching GroupId management frame.
5607 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5608 */
5609void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5610 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5611
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005612void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5613 int rssi_min_thold,
5614 int rssi_max_thold);
5615
5616void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005617
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005618/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005619 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005620 *
5621 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5622 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005623 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5624 *
5625 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5626 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005627 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005628int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5629
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005630/**
5631 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5632 * @vif: virtual interface
5633 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5634 * @gfp: allocation flags
5635 *
5636 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5637 */
5638void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5639 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5640 gfp_t gfp);
5641
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005642/**
5643 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5644 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5645 * @vif: virtual interface
5646 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5647 * @band: the band to transmit on
5648 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5649 *
5650 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5651 */
5652bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5653 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5654 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5655
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005656/**
5657 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5658 *
5659 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5660 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5661 *
5662 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5663 *
5664 * private:
5665 *
5666 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5667 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5668 */
5669struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5670 u32 next_tsf;
5671 bool has_next_tsf;
5672
5673 u8 absent;
5674
5675 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5676 struct {
5677 u32 start;
5678 u32 duration;
5679 u32 interval;
5680 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5681};
5682
5683/**
5684 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5685 *
5686 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5687 * @data: NoA tracking data
5688 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5689 *
5690 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5691 */
5692int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5693 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5694
5695/**
5696 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5697 *
5698 * @data: NoA tracking data
5699 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5700 */
5701void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5702
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005703/**
5704 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5705 * @vif: virtual interface
5706 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5707 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5708 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5709 * @gfp: allocation flags
5710 *
5711 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5712 */
5713void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5714 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5715 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005716
5717/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005718 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5719 *
5720 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5721 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5722 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5723 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5724 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5725 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5726 *
5727 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5728 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5729 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5730 *
5731 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5732 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5733 *
5734 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5735 */
5736int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5737
5738/**
5739 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5740 *
5741 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5742 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5743 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5744 *
5745 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5746 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5747 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5748 *
5749 * @sta: the station
5750 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5751 */
5752void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5753
5754/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005755 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5756 *
5757 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5758 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5759 *
5760 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5761 */
5762struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5763 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e32016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005764
5765/**
5766 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5767 *
5768 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5769 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5770 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5771 *
5772 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5773 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5774 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5775 */
5776void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5777 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5778 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005779
5780/**
5781 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5782 *
5783 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5784 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5785 *
5786 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5787 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5788 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5789 * @gfp: allocation flags
5790 */
5791void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5792 u8 inst_id,
5793 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5794 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005795
5796/**
5797 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5798 *
5799 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5800 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5801 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5802 *
5803 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5804 * @match: match event information
5805 * @gfp: allocation flags
5806 */
5807void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5808 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5809 gfp_t gfp);
5810
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005811#endif /* MAC80211_H */